FCC ID: B94WM3945ABG Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Java is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2006 Document Part Number: 406756-001 Table of contents 1 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 2 Pointing Devices .................................................................................................................. 2 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and readers ............................................................................................ 6 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Hotkey quick reference ........................................................................................................ 7 Front components ................................................................................................................................ 9 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 10 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 11 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 12 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 13 Display components ........................................................................................................................... 15 WLAN antennae ................................................................................................................................. 16 WWAN antenna ................................................................................................................................. 17 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 18 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 19 2 Specifications Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 21 Rated input power .............................................................................................................................. 22 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 23 ENWW iii iv ENWW 1 Components This chapter explains the hardware features of the computer. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. NOTE Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included in most computer models. ENWW 1 Top components Pointing Devices Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Left pointing stick button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Pointing stick Right pointing stick button Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

*This table describes factory settings. To view and change pointing device preferences, select Start

> Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. 2 Chapter 1 Components ENWW TouchPad Component

(1) TouchPad*

(2)

(3)

(4) Left TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone Right TouchPad button*

*This table describes factory settings. Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-

clicking Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights Component Description

(1) Power lights * (2) On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Wireless lights (2) Caps lock light Num lock light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is turned on. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Volume mute light On: Computer sound is turned off. Battery light Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not 4 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Component Description

(7) Drive light plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*There are 2 power lights. Both display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open; the other power light is always visible on the front of the computer. There are 2 wireless lights. Both display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open; the other wireless light is always visible on the front of the computer. ENWW Top components 5 Buttons, switches, and readers Component Description

(1) Power button*

When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. On, press to enter hibernation. In standby, briefly press to exit standby. In hibernation, briefly press to exit hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. Info Center button Wireless button*

Presentation button Starts the Presentation feature. Volume mute button Mutes and restores computer sound. Volume down button Decreases speaker volume. Volume up button Increases speaker volume

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) 6 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Component Description

(8) Fingerprint reader Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon.

*This table describes factory settings. For information about changing factory settings, refer to the user guides located in the Help and Support Center. Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Hotkey quick reference Function Display system information Clear system information Initiate standby Key Combination fn+esc fn+esc or click OK fn+f3 ENWW Top components 7 Function Key Combination Alternate image between the computer display and external display Display battery information Clear battery information Decrease screen brightness Increase screen brightness Turn on and off the ambient light sensor fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+f11 8 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Front components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Display release latch Opens the computer. Wireless light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device is turned on. Power light On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation.

(4) Battery light Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily parked the hard drive. Provides wireless communication between the computer and an optional IrDA-

compliant device.

(5) Drive light

(6) Infrared port

(7)

(8) Digital Media Slot Supports SD (Secure Digital) Memory Cards. Speakers Produce computer sound. ENWW Front components 9 Rear components

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Component Description Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector S-Video-out jack Connects an AC adapter. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. 10 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Right-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Smart card reader Supports smart cards and Java Cards. MultiBay optical drive Reads an optical disc. USB port Connects an optional USB device. RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. ENWW Right-side components 11 Left-side components Component

(1) Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) USB ports (2) Connects an optional USB device. Audio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monoaural microphone. Audio-out (headphone) jack Produces computer sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. PC Card slot Supports optional Type I or Type II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. 12 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2) Bluetooth compartment Contains a Bluetooth device (select models only). Vents (4) Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(3) Mini Card compartment Contains a wireless LAN device (select models only) CAUTION To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace the devices with only a Mini Card authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country, If you replace the device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality, and then contact Customer Care through the Help and Support Center.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Battery release latches Release the battery from the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Docking connector Connects an optional docking device. Accessory battery connector Connects an optional accessory battery. ENWW Bottom components 13 Component Description

(8)

(9) Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Display components

(1)

(2) Component Display release latch Internal display switch Description Opens the computer. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the computer is turned on. NOTE This switch is not visible from the outside of the computer. ENWW Display components 15 WLAN antennae Two wireless antennae send and receive wireless device signals over wireless local area networks

(WLANs). These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices pertaining to your region, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. NOTE For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. NOTE The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. 16 Chapter 1 Components ENWW WWAN antenna The wireless antenna inside the display enclosure allows you to connect to a wireless wide-area network

(WWAN), and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless module and service from a supported cellular network operator. For more information on HP Broadband Wireless and how to sign up for service, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide included with your computer. ENWW WWAN antenna 17 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. HP Smart AC Adapter Converts AC power to DC power. NOTE The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand alone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with the computer. Modem cable*

Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-

specific modem adapter. Battery*

Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 18 Chapter 1 Components ENWW Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide information about optional wireless devices available on select models, and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of the computer. ENWW Labels 19 20 Chapter 1 Components ENWW 2 Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. ENWW Operating environment 21 Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with your computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand alone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with the computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A 65 W; 19.0 V dc @

4.74 A 90W Operating current 3.5 A; or 4.9 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 22 Chapter 2 Specifications ENWW Index A AC adapter identifying 18 altitude specifications 21 antennae 16 applications key, Windows 7 audio-in (microphone) jack 12 audio-out (headphone) jack 12 B battery identifying 18 battery bay 13, 19 battery charge information 8 battery light, identifying 4, 9 battery release latch 13 bays battery 13, 19 Bluetooth device 13 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment 13 Bluetooth label 19 buttons mute 6 power 6 wireless 6 C cable RJ-11 (modem) 18 caps lock light 4 Certificate of Authenticity label 19 compartments Bluetooth 13 memory module 14 Mini Card 13 components bottom 13 display 15 front 9 left-side 12 rear 10 right-side 11 top 2 connector, power 10 cord, power, identifying 18 increasing screen brightness 8 initiating standby 7 setting ambient light sensor 8 switching screen image 8 humidity specifications 21 D display image, switching 8 screen brightness hotkeys 8 display release latch 9, 15 display switch 15 docking connector 13 drive light 5, 9 drives hard 14 optical 11 E environmental specifications 21 external monitor port 10 F fingerprint reader 7 fn key identifying 7 function keys identifying 7 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 12 hotkeys battery charge information 8 decreasing screen brightness displaying system information 8 7 I Info Center button 6 internal display switch 15 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 12 audio-out (headphone) 12 RJ-11 (modem) 11 RJ-45 (network) 11 K keypad keys 7 keys esc 7 fn 7 function 7 keypad 7 Windows applications 7 Windows logo 7 L labels Bluetooth 19 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 19 modem approval 19 regulatory 19 service tag 19 wireless certification 19 WLAN 19 latches battery release 13 ENWW Index 23 Windows logo key 7 wireless antennae 16 wireless button 6 wireless certification label 19 wireless light 4, 9 WLAN device 19 WLAN label 19 WWAN device 17 display release 9, 15 lights R rated input power specifications battery 4, 9 caps lock 4 drive 5, 9 mute 4 num lock 4 power 4, 9 volume 4 wireless 4, 9 lock, security cable 10 M memory module compartment 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 12 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Mini Card compartment 13 modem approval label 19 modem cable adapter 18 monitor port, external 10 mute button 6 mute light 4 N network (RJ-45) jack 11 num lock light 4 O operating environment specifications 21 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Product Key 19 optical drive, identifying 11 P PC Card slot 12 ports external monitor 10 USB 11, 12 power button 6 power connector 10 power cord 18 power light 4, 9 Presentation button 6 Product Key 19 product name and number, computer 19 22 reader, fingerprint 7 regulatory information modem approval label 19 regulatory label 19 wireless certification labels 19 release latch battery 13 display 9 RJ-11 (modem) cable 18 RJ-11 (modem) jack 11 RJ-45 (network) jack 11 S screen brightness hotkeys 8 screen image, switching 8 security cable slot 10 serial number, computer 19 service tag 19 slots memory module 14 PC Card 12 security cable 10 smart card reader 11 speakers 9 specifications operating environment 21 rated input power 22 standby hotkey 7 system information hotkey 7 T temperature specifications 21 traveling with the computer environmental specifications 22 modem approval label 19 wireless certification labels 19 U USB ports, identifying 11, 12 V vents 12, 13 W Windows applications key 7 24 Index ENWW

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Document Part Number: 384459-005 January 2006 Contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 12 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . 13 Products with wireless LAN devices. 14 Brazilian notices. 15 Wireless LAN certification markings . 15 Canadian notices . 16 Avis Canadien . 16 European Union notices . 17 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 18 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 19 Ergonomics notice . 19 Indian notice. 19 Japanese notices . 110 Wireless LAN 802.11b device. 110 Wireless LAN 802.11g device. 111 Wireless LAN certification markings . 111 Bluetooth device . 114 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices . 114 Korean notice . 115 Taiwan notice . 115 Airline travel notice . 116 Battery notices . 116 Energy Star compliance . 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices ii Contents Laser safety notices . 117 CDRH regulations . 117 Laser information . 118 Modem notices . 119 Telecommunications device approvals . 120 U.S. modem statements . 120 U.S. modem declarations. 123 Canadian modem statements . 125 Japanese modem statements . 125 New Zealand modem statements. 126 Power cord notice. 128 Japanese power cord notice . 128 Macrovision Corporation notice . 129 2 Safety notices Travel notice. 21 Battery notices . 21 Power cord notices . 22 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal . 31 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union . 32 United States mercury disposal . 32 Index iii Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 11 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 12 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify the product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 13 Regulatory notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 14 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

-

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 15 Regulatory notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725-5825 MHz band, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 16 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices European Union notices Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 17 Regulatory notices The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 18 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice German Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 19 Regulatory notices Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b device 2. 4DS 4 110 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Wireless LAN 802.11g device 2. 4OF 4 Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 111 Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

112 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 113 Regulatory notices Bluetooth device 2 . 4 F H 1 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

114 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Korean notice Taiwan notice Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 115 Regulatory notices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to the user guide included with the product. Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Laser safety notices All systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products effective August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976, onward. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 117 Regulatory notices Laser information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly and module-level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. 118 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Modem notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 119 Regulatory notices Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 120 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call Customer Care. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 121 Regulatory notices Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 122 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 123 Regulatory notices 124 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 125 Regulatory notices The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. 126 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications. a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 127 Regulatory notices Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your service partner. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice 128 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 129 Regulatory notices 130 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 2 Safety notices Travel notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Battery notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING: Keep the battery pack away from children. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 21 Safety notices Power cord notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 22 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some notices may not apply. Battery disposal N WARNING: When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack disposal. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 31 Environmental notices Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. 32 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index equipment 32 mercury 32 E Energy Star compliance 116 environmental notices 31 equipment disposal notice 32 ergonomics notice 19 European Union notices 17 F Federal Communications Commission cables 12 modifications 12 notice 12 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 G Germany, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 H hardware device, identifying 11 I Indian notice 19 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 5-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 A airline travel notice 116 B battery disposal notice 31 battery notice 116, 21 Brazilian notice 15 C cables, Federal Communications Commission 12 Canadian modem statement 125 Canadian notices 16 Center for Devices and Radiological Health 117 D Declaration of Conformity 13 devices hardware, identifying 11 wireless LAN 14 disposal notices battery 31 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index1 Index Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 J Japanese modem statement 125 Japanese notice 110 Japanese power cord notice 128 K Korean notice 115 L laser information 118 laser safety notice 117 M Macrovision Corporation notice 129 mercury disposal notice 32 modem notices 119 modem statements Canadian 125 Japanese 125 New Zealand 126 U.S. 120 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 12 N New Zealand modem statement 126 notices airline travel 116 battery 116, 21, 31 Brazilian 15 Canadian 16 environmental 31 equipment disposal 32 ergonomics 19 European Union 17 Federal Communications Commission 12 Indian 19 Japanese 110 Japanese power cord 128 Korean 115 laser safety 117 Macrovision Corporation 129 mercury disposal 32 modem 119 power cords 128, 22 Taiwan 115 travel 21 P power cord notice 128, 22 T Taiwan notice 115 telecommunications device approvals 120 travel notice 21 U U.S. modem statement 120 V voice support 128 W wireless LAN devices 14 Index2 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Fifth Edition January 2006 First Edition May 2005 Document Part Number: 384459-005

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2006 Document Part Number: 406820-001 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 German ............................................................................................................... 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 6 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 10 Laser safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 11 CDRH regulations .............................................................................................................. 12 Laser information ............................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 13 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 13 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 14 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 16 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 16 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 18 ENWW iii Voice support .................................................................................................... 18 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 19 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 19 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 19 2 Safety notices Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 21 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 21 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 24 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 25 iv ENWW 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices installed on the computer. ENWW 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. ENWW European Union notices 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice German Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 7 The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Korean notice Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to the user guide included with the product. Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Laser safety notices All systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. ENWW Laser safety notices 11 CDRH regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products effective August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976, onward. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Laser information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly and module-level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. ENWW Modem notices 13 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call Customer Care. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW ENWW Modem notices 15 Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

ENWW Modem notices 17 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications. a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. 18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your service partner. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ENWW Power cord notice 19 20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW 2 Safety notices Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery pack away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Travel notice 21 22 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some notices may not apply. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack disposal. ENWW Battery disposal 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 23 battery notice 10, 21 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 16 Canadian notices 4 Center for Devices and Radiological Health 12 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 23 equipment 24 mercury 24 E Energy Star compliance 10 environmental notices 23 equipment disposal notice 24 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 I Indian notice 6 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese modem statement 16 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 19 K Korean notice 10 L laser information 12 laser safety notice 11 airline travel 10 battery 10, 21, 23 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 23 equipment disposal 24 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 Indian 6 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 19 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 19 mercury disposal 24 modem 13 power cords 19, 21 Taiwan 10 travel 21 M Macrovision Corporation notice 19 mercury disposal notice 24 modem notices 13 modem statements Canadian 16 Japanese 16 New Zealand 18 U.S. 14 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 18 notices P power cord notice 19, 21 T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 21 U U.S. modem statement 14 V voice support 18 W wireless LAN devices 3 ENWW Index 25 26 Index ENWW

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Tablet PC Tour Document Part Number: 405775-001 May 2006 This guide explains the computer hardware features. Contents 1 Components Top components . 12 Lights . 12 Pointing devices. 14 Buttons and reader . 16 Keys . 17 Hotkey quick reference . 18 Pen-activated buttons . 19 Display components . 110 Front components. 112 Rear components . 113 Right-side components. 114 Left-side components . 115 Bottom components . 117 Wireless antennae. 119 Pen components . 120 Additional hardware components . 121 Labels . 122 2 Specifications Operating environment. 21 Rated input power . 22 Index Tablet PC Tour ii 1 Components This chapter explains the hardware features of the computer. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard external features included in most computer models. Tablet PC Tour 11 Components Top components Lights Component Description 1 Volume mute light On: Computer sound is turned off. 2 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 3 Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP Mobile Data Protection with accelerometer software has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

(Continued) 12 Tablet PC Tour Component 4 Battery light 5 Power light 6 Wireless light 7 Num lock light Components Description Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off. Green: The computer is on. Blinking green: The computer is in standby. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network

(WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is turned on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Tablet PC Tour 13 Components Pointing devices Touchpad The pointing stick and TouchPad controls can be used interchangeably. The following illustration and table describe the computer pointing devices, which vary by model. Component 1 Pointing stick 2 Left pointing stick button 3 TouchPad*

14 Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking.

(Continued) Tablet PC Tour Components Component Description 4 Left TouchPad button*

5 Right TouchPad button*

Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 6 TouchPad scroll zone*

Scrolls up or down. 7 Right pointing stick button Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

*This table describes default settings. To view and change TouchPad preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Tablet PC Tour 15 Components Buttons and reader Component Description 1 Fingerprint reader Allows a fingerprint logon to Microsoft Windows, instead of a password logon. 2 Presentation button Starts the Presentation feature. 3 Volume mute button Mutes and restores computer sound. 4 Volume down button Decreases computer sound. 5 Volume up button Increases computer sound. 16 Tablet PC Tour Keys Components Component Description 1 Function keys (6) Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Refer to the table in Hotkey quick reference for a description of each hotkey. 2 fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. 3 Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. 4 Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys (15) Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Tablet PC Tour 17 Components Hotkey quick reference To perform this function Initiate standby Resume from standby Press fn+f3 Slide the Power switch toward the front of the computer. Alternate between computer display and external display Display battery information Clear battery information Decrease screen brightness Increase screen brightness Display system information Clear system information fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+esc esc or click OK 18 Tablet PC Tour Pen-activated buttons Components Component Description 1 Tablet PC Input Panel launch button*

2 Rotate button*

3 Q button*

When Windows is running, opens Microsoft Tablet PC Input Panel, which includes a handwriting pad and an on-screen keyboard. Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. When Windows is running, opens or closes the Q Menu.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the Tablet PC Input Panel launch button, rotate button, and Q button, use your pen to press the Q button and click Tablet PC Settings. Tablet PC Tour 19 Components Display components Component 1 Pen holder Description Secures the pen to the computer. 2 Pen eject button Ejects the pen from the pen holder. 3 Rotating hinge 4 Jog dial*

Swivels the display and converts the computer from notebook mode into tablet PC mode or vice versa. Functions like enter and the up and down arrow keys on a standard keyboard:

Press inward to enter a command. Rotate up to scroll up. Rotate down to scroll down.

(Continued) 110 Tablet PC Tour Components Component Description 5 Windows security button*

6 Fingerprint reader When pressed while Windows is open, enters the ctrl+alt+delete command. The Computer Setup utility is open, enters the reset command. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows instead of a password logon.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the Windows security button and jog dial, refer to Pointing Devices and Keyboard. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. Tablet PC Tour 111 Components Front components Component 1 Infrared port 2 Bluetooth module Description Provides wireless communication between the computer and an optional IrDA-compliant device. Sends and receives Bluetooth device signals.

(select models only) Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should be not less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the computer display is closed. 3 Display release button Opens the computer. Keep diskettes and other magnetic media away from the magnetic fields located around the Display release button. Magnetic fields can erase diskette data. 112 Tablet PC Tour Rear components Components Component 1 USB port Description Connects an optional USB device. 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. 3 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 4 Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 5 External monitor port 6 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional external VGA monitor or projector. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card, with an optional, standard (4-pin) S-Video cable. The jacks extra 3 pins also enable an optional S-Video-to-composite adapter to be used with the computer. Tablet PC Tour 113 Components Right-side components Component Description 1 Audio-out (headphone) jack 2 Audio-in (microphone) jack 3 Powered USB port 4 PC Card slot or optional smart card reader 5 Digital Media slot Produces computer sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Provides power to a USB device, such as an optional external MultiBay, if used with a powered USB cable. On select models, the PC Card slot may be replaced with the optional smart card reader. If your computer has a PC Card slot, it supports optional Type I, Type II, 32-bit (CardBus), or 16-bit PC Cards. a smart card reader, it accepts smart cards or Java Cards. Accepts SD (Secure Digital) Memory Cards or MultiMediaCards. 114 Tablet PC Tour Left-side components Components Component Description 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Using the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows, thick rugs, or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 3 Wireless button Turns the wireless feature on or off, but

(select models only)*

does not establish a connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4 USB port Connects an optional USB device.

(Continued) Tablet PC Tour 115 Components Component Description 5 Info Center button 6 Power switch*

Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. When the computer is Off, slide toward the front of the computer and release to turn on the computer. In standby, slide toward the front of the computer and release to exit standby. In hibernation, slide toward the front of the computer and release to exit hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, slide the power switch toward the front of the computer and hold for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. 7 Speaker Produces computer sound.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the power features, refer to the user guides located in the Help and Support Center. 116 Tablet PC Tour Bottom components Components Component Description 1 Docking connector Connects the computer to an optional docking device. 2 Accessory battery connector Connects an optional accessory battery.

(Continued) Tablet PC Tour 117 Components Component 3 Vents (2) Description Enable airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows, thick rugs, or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 4 Battery bay Holds the primary battery pack. 5 Primary battery pack release latch Releases the primary battery pack from the battery bay. 6 Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 7 Expansion memory module compartment Contains one expansion memory module slot. 118 Tablet PC Tour Components Wireless antennae On select computer models, 2 wireless antennae send and receive wireless device signals. These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices pertaining to your region, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. Tablet PC Tour 119 Components Pen components Component 1 Pen tip 2 Pen button 3 Pen tether eyelet 4 Pen eraser Description Interacts with the tablet PC whenever the tip is touching the screen or within 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) of the screen. When tapped on or held over a pen-activated button, activates the button. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Used with the tether eyelet on the tablet PC, enables you to tether the pen to the tablet PC. Enables you to erase handwriting on the tablet PC. 120 Tablet PC Tour Additional hardware components Components Component Description 1 HP Smart AC Adapter Converts AC power to DC power. 2 Power cord*

3 Primary battery pack*

4 Modem cable*

5 Country-specific modem adapter (included by region as required)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an

(RJ-11) telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, battery packs, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Battery packs vary by model. Tablet PC Tour 121 Components Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot systems problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. The information on the service tag is also available through the Help and Support Center. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network

(WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one certification label per wireless device is included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of this computer. 122 Tablet PC Tour 2 Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications of the computer. Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia)

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia)

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Tablet PC Tour 21 Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the computer be powered only with an AC adapter or DC power cord supplied by or approved for an HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications:

Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 22 Tablet PC Tour Index right pointing stick 15 right TouchPad 15 rotate 19 Tablet PC Input Panel launch 19 volume 16 Windows security 111 wireless 115 C caps lock light 12 connectors accessory battery 117 docking 117 power 113 country-specific modem adapter 121 D Digital Media Slot 114 display release button 112 docking connector 117 drive light 12 E embedded numeric keypad 17 environmental specifications 21 A AC adapter 113 accessory battery 117 accessory battery connector 117 altitude specifications 21 audio-in (microphone) jack 114 audio-out (headphone) jack 114 B battery bay, primary 118 battery connector 117 battery light 13 battery pack accessory battery connector 117 battery bay 118 battery pack release latch 118 Bluetooth module 112 buttons Info Center 116 left pointing stick 14 left TouchPad 15 pen eject 110 presentation 16 Q 19 Tablet PC Tour Index1 expansion memory module compartment 118 external monitor port 113 F fingerprint reader 16 fn key 17 function keys 17 H hard drive bay 118 headphone jack 114 hibernation, exiting 116 HP Smart AC Adapter 121 humidity specifications 21 I Info Center button 116 infrared port 112 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 114 audio-out (headphone) 114 RJ-11 (modem) 113 RJ-45 (network) 113 S-Video-out 113 Java Cards 114 jog dial location 110 K keys fn 17 function 17 keypad 17 Index Windows applications 17 Windows logo 17 L labels 122 left pointing stick button 14 left TouchPad button 15 lights battery 13 caps lock 12 drive 12 num lock 13 power 13 volume mute 12 wireless 13 M memory module expansion compartment 118 microphone jack 114 modem jack 113 MultiMediaCard 114 mute button 16 N network jack 113 num lock light 13 O operating environment specifications 21 P PC Card slot 114 pen components 120 eject button 110 Tablet PC Tour Index2 Index operating environment 21 rated input power 22 standby, exiting 116 S-Video-out jack 113 T Tablet PC Input Panel launch button 19 temperature specifications 21 TouchPad area 14 TouchPad buttons 15 TouchPad scroll zone 15 traveling with the computer, environmental specifications 22 U USB port 113, 115 USB port, powered 114 V vents 115, 118 volume controls 16 mute light 12 W Windows applications key 17 Windows logo key 17 Windows security button, identified 111 wireless antennae 119 wireless button 115 wireless light 13 pen eraser 120 pen holder 110 pen-activated buttons Q Menu 19 rotate 19 Tablet PC Input Panel launch 19 pointing stick buttons 14 pointing stick location 14 power connector 113 power light 13 power switch 116 presentation button 16 Q Q button 19 R rated input power specifications 22 right pointing stick button 15 right TouchPad button 15 RJ-11 (modem) jack 113 RJ-45 (network) jack 113 rotate button 19 rotating hinge 110 S security cable slot 115 slots Digital Media 114 PC Card 114 smart card reader 114 smart card reader 114 smart cards 114 speaker 116 specifications Tablet PC Tour Index3 Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Java is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Tablet PC Tour First Edition: May 2006 Document Part Number: 405775-001

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Document Part Number: 384459-005 January 2006 Contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 12 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . 13 Products with wireless LAN devices. 14 Brazilian notices. 15 Wireless LAN certification markings . 15 Canadian notices . 16 Avis Canadien . 16 European Union notices . 17 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 18 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 19 Ergonomics notice . 19 Indian notice. 19 Japanese notices . 110 Wireless LAN 802.11b device. 110 Wireless LAN 802.11g device. 111 Wireless LAN certification markings . 111 Bluetooth device . 114 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices . 114 Korean notice . 115 Taiwan notice . 115 Airline travel notice . 116 Battery notices . 116 Energy Star compliance . 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices ii Contents Laser safety notices . 117 CDRH regulations . 117 Laser information . 118 Modem notices . 119 Telecommunications device approvals . 120 U.S. modem statements . 120 U.S. modem declarations. 123 Canadian modem statements . 125 Japanese modem statements . 125 New Zealand modem statements. 126 Power cord notice. 128 Japanese power cord notice . 128 Macrovision Corporation notice . 129 2 Safety notices Travel notice. 21 Battery notices . 21 Power cord notices . 22 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal . 31 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union . 32 United States mercury disposal . 32 Index iii Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 11 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 12 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify the product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 13 Regulatory notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 14 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

-

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 15 Regulatory notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725-5825 MHz band, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 16 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices European Union notices Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 17 Regulatory notices The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 18 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice German Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 19 Regulatory notices Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b device 2. 4DS 4 110 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Wireless LAN 802.11g device 2. 4OF 4 Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 111 Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

112 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 113 Regulatory notices Bluetooth device 2 . 4 F H 1 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

114 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Korean notice Taiwan notice Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 115 Regulatory notices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to the user guide included with the product. Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Laser safety notices All systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products effective August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976, onward. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 117 Regulatory notices Laser information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly and module-level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. 118 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Modem notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 119 Regulatory notices Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 120 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call Customer Care. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 121 Regulatory notices Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 122 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 123 Regulatory notices 124 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 125 Regulatory notices The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. 126 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications. a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 127 Regulatory notices Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your service partner. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice 128 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 129 Regulatory notices 130 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 2 Safety notices Travel notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Battery notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING: Keep the battery pack away from children. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 21 Safety notices Power cord notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 22 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some notices may not apply. Battery disposal N WARNING: When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack disposal. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 31 Environmental notices Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. 32 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index equipment 32 mercury 32 E Energy Star compliance 116 environmental notices 31 equipment disposal notice 32 ergonomics notice 19 European Union notices 17 F Federal Communications Commission cables 12 modifications 12 notice 12 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 G Germany, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 H hardware device, identifying 11 I Indian notice 19 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 5-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 A airline travel notice 116 B battery disposal notice 31 battery notice 116, 21 Brazilian notice 15 C cables, Federal Communications Commission 12 Canadian modem statement 125 Canadian notices 16 Center for Devices and Radiological Health 117 D Declaration of Conformity 13 devices hardware, identifying 11 wireless LAN 14 disposal notices battery 31 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index1 Index Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 J Japanese modem statement 125 Japanese notice 110 Japanese power cord notice 128 K Korean notice 115 L laser information 118 laser safety notice 117 M Macrovision Corporation notice 129 mercury disposal notice 32 modem notices 119 modem statements Canadian 125 Japanese 125 New Zealand 126 U.S. 120 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 12 N New Zealand modem statement 126 notices airline travel 116 battery 116, 21, 31 Brazilian 15 Canadian 16 environmental 31 equipment disposal 32 ergonomics 19 European Union 17 Federal Communications Commission 12 Indian 19 Japanese 110 Japanese power cord 128 Korean 115 laser safety 117 Macrovision Corporation 129 mercury disposal 32 modem 119 power cords 128, 22 Taiwan 115 travel 21 P power cord notice 128, 22 T Taiwan notice 115 telecommunications device approvals 120 travel notice 21 U U.S. modem statement 120 V voice support 128 W wireless LAN devices 14 Index2 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Fifth Edition January 2006 First Edition May 2005 Document Part Number: 384459-005

367427-002.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM A Notebook tour Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. The illustrations in this appendix identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started A1 367427-002.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Top components Components 1 Caps lock light 5 Volume down button 2 Presentation button 6 Volume up button 3 Volume mute light 7 Num lock light 4 Volume mute button A2 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Keys Notebook tour Components 1 Function keys (6) 4 Windows application key 2 fn key 3 Microsoft Windows logo key 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys (15) Getting Started A3 367427-002.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Pointing devices Components 1 Pointing stick 5 Right TouchPad button 2 Left pointing stick button 6 TouchPad scroll zone 3 TouchPad 7 Right pointing stick button 4 Left TouchPad button A4 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Display components Notebook tour Components 1 Pen holder 4 Jog dial 2 Pen eject button 5 Windows Security button 3 Rotating hinge 6 Fingerprint reader Getting Started A5 367427-002.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Pen-activated buttons Components 1 Tablet PC Input Panel launch button 2 Rotate button 3 Q Menu button A6 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Wireless antennae Two wireless antennae send and receive wireless device signals. These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices pertaining to your region, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. For optimal transmission, keep the area immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. Getting Started A7 367427-002.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Front components Rear components Components 1 Wireless light 8 USB port 2 Power/standby light 9 RJ-11 (modem) jack 3 Battery light 4 Drive light 5 Infrared port

- RJ-45 (network) jack q Power connector w External monitor port 6 Bluetooth module e S-Video-out jack 7 Display release button A8 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Left-side components Notebook tour Right-side components Components 1 Security cable slot 7 Speaker 2 Vent*

8 Audio-out (headphone) jack 3 Wireless button

(select models only) 9 Audio-in (microphone) jack 4 USB port

- Powered USB port 5 Info Center button q PC Card slot or optional smart card reader 6 Power switch w Digital Media Slot

*Depending on computer model, vents vary in number and location. Getting Started A9 367427-002.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Notebook tour Bottom components Components 1 Docking connector 5 Primary battery pack release latch 2 Accessory battery connector 6 Hard drive bay 3 Vents (2) 4 Primary battery bay 7 Expansion memory module compartment A10 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Pen components Notebook tour Components 1 Pen tip 2 Pen button 3 Pen tether eyelet 4 Pen eraser Getting Started A11 367427-002.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM 367427-002.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM B Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must Choose an Internet service provider (ISP). Choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband, wireless, or dial-up, and connect the hardware. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choose an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The New Connection Wizard helps you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started B1 367427-002.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Use the New Connection Wizard You can use the New Connection Wizard to connect to the Internet If you already have an account with an ISP. If you have a disc from an ISP. If you do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. If you have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address, POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard and instructions for using the wizard:

Select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. B2 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Choose the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband: High-speed Internet access is available through Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services For broadband access, additional hardware and/or software must be provided by your ISP. Wireless: For high-speed mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. A wireless network set up at home requires a wireless router, purchased separately. To learn about setting up wireless access, visit http://www.hp.com/go/wireless (English only). Dial-up: You can access the Internet by dialing into a service provider using a modem cable connected to an RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started B3 367427-002.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM 367427-002.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM C Backup and recovery The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. HP installed drivers, utilities, and applications can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using the HP Backup and Recovery Manager. To copy software to a disc on this computer, the computer must be connected to an optional external MultiBay device with an optical drive. Safeguard your data Software or devices added to the computer can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder. Getting Started C1 367427-002.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery Back up the system Using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can Back up specific files and folders. Back up the entire system. Back up modifications since your last backup, using HP system recovery points. Schedule backups. Back up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to discs. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Backup to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Backup individual files and folders, and then click Next. The Backup Wizard opens. C2 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery 5. Click Backup selected files from most common locations

(Recommended). or Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access advanced filtering techniques. 6. Click Next. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up specific files or folders. This process may take several minutes depending on the file size and speed of the computer. If you are backing up your information onto a disc, you will be prompted to insert a blank disc into the optical drive. Back up the entire system When you perform a complete system backup, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. To back up the entire system:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Next. Getting Started C3 367427-002.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery 3. Click Backup to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Backup entire hard drive, and then click Next. The Entire Drive Backup Manager opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select where you want to back up your entire drive. You can back up to one of the following locations:

On my PC: This option backs up your information to the computer hard drive. On another drive: This option backs up your information to an optional external hard drive. On a network: This option backs up your information to a mapped network drive. 7. Select the Protect data access with password check box, and type your password in the Password box. This step is optional. If you do not want to password protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with password check box. 8. Click Next to back up your entire hard drive. This process may take over an hour, depending on the computer speed and the amount of information being stored. C4 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery Back up modifications made to the system When you back up modifications made to the system, you are creating system recovery points. A system recovery point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to the system. By default, the first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that last recovery point. After you create a recovery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recovery points. You can schedule recovery points for a specific time or event in the system. To create and schedule a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Expert Mode. 3. Click Create or manage recovery points, and then click Next. The Recovery Point Manager opens. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to create or manage recovery points. Getting Started C5 367427-002.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery Schedule backups To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The Backup and Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Expert Mode. 3. Click Schedule Backups. 4. Click Next. The Backup Scheduler opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Schedule recovery points at specific intervals (daily, weekly) or at specific events, such as at system start or when you dock to a docking station. Click Next to further define the settings. A summary of your recovery point settings is displayed. 7. Click Next to finalize these settings. 8. Click Finish to exit. C6 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery Recover the system HP Backup and Recovery Manager analyzes the hard drive and creates a dedicated hard drive recovery partition on the hard drive large enough to store a copy of the full factory image. You choose whether you want to store that copy on the recovery partition, on another drive, or on external recovery discs. Before using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, try repairing the system by running Microsoft Windows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support, and then search for System Restore. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to Create recovery discs (recommended). The recovery discs are used to boot the computer and to restore the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system failure or instability. To create recovery discs or boot this computer using recovery discs, the computer must be connected to an optional external MultiBay device with an optical drive. If you dont have a CD or DVD burner, a copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive or on a network drive. Perform a recovery. You can perform a full system recovery or recover important files from a recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs that you create. Getting Started C7 AppC.fm Page 8 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:55 AM Backup and recovery Create recovery discs (recommended) After setting up the computer for the first time, you can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The recovery discs are used to start up

(boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software applications to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. CAUTION: After you create the recovery discs, you can increase the amount of space on the hard drive by deleting the recovery partition. However, doing this is not recommended. If you delete this partition, you will lose any information that is on the partition. Only one set of recovery discs can be created for this computer. Before creating recovery discs:

Connect the computer to an optional external MultiBay device with an optical drive. Use high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media.

(purchase separately) DVDRW/R and double-layer DVDRW are not compatible with the HP Backup and Recovery Manager software. Number each disc before inserting it into the external MultiBay device optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open the program, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left off. C8 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create recovery CDs and DVDs to recover the system (recommended). 4. Click Next. The Recovery Media Creator Wizard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Write to CD/DVD, and then click Next. 7. Click Factory image recovery discs, and then click Next. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you will be prompted to connect to AC power before you can go to the next step. 8. Select the type of discs you want to use, and then click Next. The software examines the image and displays the number of blank discs needed to create your recovery discs. 9. Insert the first disc and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the creation of the recovery discs. Getting Started C9 367427-002.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery Perform a recovery Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optional external MultiBay device optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive Start the full system recovery from either the Start button or f11. 1. From the Start menu:

a. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager opens. b. Click Expert Mode. c. Click Start PC Recovery, and then click Next. d. Click Next again to restart the computer. PC Recovery opens. e. Continue to step 2 to complete the recovery process. or C10 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Backup and recovery From f11:

a. Restart the computer. b. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. c. Continue to step 2 to complete the recovery process. 2. Choose one of the folowing options:

Recover PC to a specific point in time: Allows you to recover from a previous recovery point. Recover PCs original factory installation and backup data: Backs up your information and then performs a full system recovery. Recover PCs factory installation: Formats the hard drive and performs a full system recovery. This option does not perform a backup; your information will be erased. Back up files: Allows you to back up your files on the hard drive. 3. Click Next. The system prepares your hard drive and begins the recovery process. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery. Getting Started C11 367427-002.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM 367427-002.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM D Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications. Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started D1 367427-002.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by battery or an AC-to-DC adapter. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. D2 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Index Bluetooth module, location A8 bottom components A10 buttons display release 17, A8 Info Center A9 left pointing stick A4 left TouchPad A4 mute A2 pen eject A5 presentation A2 Q Menu A6 right pointing stick A4 right TouchPad A4 Rotate A6 Tablet PC Input Panel launch A6 volume control A2 Windows Security A5 wireless A9 C cables, modem 24 caps lock light A2 CDs, ISP B2 components bottom A10 display A5 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector A10 altitude specifications D1 antennae, wireless A7 antivirus software 23 audio-in (microphone) jack A9 audio-out (headphone) jack A9 B backing up files C2 backup and recovery recovering the system C7 battery bay, primary A10 battery connector, accessory A10 battery light 16, A8 battery pack charging 16 inserting 14 battery pack release latch A10 Getting Started Index1 367427-002.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Index front A8 keys A3 left-side A9 pen A11 pen-activated buttons A6 pointing devices A4 rear A8 right-side A9 top A2 computer turning off 28 turning on 17 computer setup 13 connectors docking A10 power A8 cord, power surge protection 24 customer support 37, 38 D devices, external drivers 36 troubleshooting 36 diagnostic features 37 Digital Media slot A9 display components A5 display release button 17, A8 opening the display 17 docking connector A10 drive light A8 drivers obtaining 36 E electrical storm, safety issues 24 embedded numeric keypad keys A3 emergency shutdown procedures 28 environment altitude D1 humidity D1 operating D1 temperature D1 eraser, pen A11 external devices drivers 36 troubleshooting 36 external monitor port A8 F fingerprint reader A5 firewalls 24 fn key A3 front components A8 Function keys A3 H hard drive bay A10 hard drive light A8 headphone jack A9 Help and Support Center 37 hibernation 33 HP Smart AC Adapter 12 humidity specifications D1 I IEC 60950 compliance 25 Info Center button A9 Index2 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM infrared port A8 installing software 22 Internet Connection Firewall 24 J jacks audio-in (microphone) A9 audio-out (headphone) A9 RJ-11 (modem) A8 RJ-45 (network) A8 jog dial A5 K keys embedded numeric keypad A3 fn A3 function A3 Microsoft Windows logo A3 Windows application A3 L labels, service tag 38 LAN (local area network) 26 left pointing stick button A4 left TouchPad button A4 left-side components A9 lights battery 16, A8 caps lock A2 drive A8 mute A2 num lock A2 power/standby 111, A8 wireless A8 Index M memory module compartment A10 microphone jack A9 Microsoft Windows logo key A3 model number 37 modem surge protection 24 virus protection 23 modem cable 24 modem, internal 26 monitor, external 36 mute button A2 mute light A2 N Norton Internet Security 23 num lock light A2 O opening the computer 17 operating system displaying version number 38 finding tours and tutorials 37 Help and Support Center 37 Internet Connection wizard B2 updating 24 Operating System disc C1 operating voltage D2 overheating 25, 35 Getting Started Index3 367427-002.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Index P PC card slot A9 pen button A11 pen components A11 pen eject button A5 pen eraser A11 pen holder A5 pen tether eyelet A11 pen tip A11 pointing stick A4 ports external monitor A8 infrared A8 USB A8, A9 power connecting the computer to external 15 surge protection 24 turning off 28 turning on 111 power connector A8 power cord securing 32 surge protection 24 power information, traveling D2 power problems, troubleshooting 32 power switch location A9 turning on 111 power/standby light 111, A8 powered USB port A9 presentation button A2 printer 36 privacy protection features 24 Product Id 38 product number 38 Q Q Menu button A6 Quick troubleshooting 32 R rated input power specifications D2 reader, fingerprint A5 rear components A8 recovery, system C1 registration displaying operating system registration number 38 regulatory information notices 26 right pointing stick button A4 right TouchPad button A4 right-side components A9 RJ-11 (modem) jack A8 RJ-45 (network) jack A8 Rotate button A6 rotating hinge A5 rotating the display 17 notebook mode 19 tablet PC mode 18 S safeguarding data C1 Safety and Comfort Guide 25 security cable slot A9 serial number 37, 38 Index4 Getting Started 367427-002.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM service tag 38 shutting down 28 slots Digital Media A9 PC card A9 software firewall 24 Help and Support Center 37 Norton Internet Security 23 updating 27 speaker A9 specifications 37 standby 33 standby/power light A8 S-Video-out jack A8 system recovery C1 T Tablet PC Input Panel launch button A6 technical support 37, 38 temperature safety considerations 25 troubleshooting 35 temperature specifications D1 TouchPad left TouchPad button A4 location A4 right TouchPad button A4 scroll zone A4 tours, product information 37 traveling with your computer, environmental factors D1 Index troubleshooting procedures external device problems 36 hibernation or standby problems 33 overheating problems 35 power problems 32 software problems 34 virus problems 34 wireless network problems 36 troubleshooting resources, Help and Support Center 37 turning off the computer 28 turning on the computer 111 tutorials, tours 37 U updates, software 27 USB ports A8, A9 powered A9 V vents 35, A9, A10 viruses, computer 23, 34 volume controls A2 mute light A2 W Windows A5 Windows application key A3 Windows firewall 24 Windows logo key A3 Windows Security button A5 wireless antennae A7 wireless button A9 Getting Started Index5 367427-002.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 7, 2006 9:33 AM Index wireless light A8 Wireless Regulatory Notices 26 WLAN (wireless local area network) 26 Index6 Getting Started

Installation Guide WLAN Module Installation Guide (GR) Installation Guide (IS) Installation Guide (FR) Installation Guide (IT) Installation Guide (JP) Installation Guide (KR) Installation Guide (SC) Installation Guide (TC) Document Part Number: 453005-B21 May 2007 Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide WLAN Module First Edition: May 2007 Document Part Number: 453005-B21 Contents English Before you begin . 1 Installing the WLAN module. 2 Installing the WLAN module software . 5 Removing a WLAN module . 6 Information and updates. 8 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 10 Modifications. 10 Cables . 10 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . 11 Products with wireless LAN devices. 12 Brazilian notices. 13 Canadian notices . 13 Avis Canadien . 14 European Union notices . 14 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 16 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 17 Indian notice. 17 Korean notice . 17 Taiwan notice . 18 Airline travel notice . 18 Installation Guide iii 453005-B21 English Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures, refer to the user guides included with your computer to perform the following steps:

1. Identify the WLAN module slot location and how to access it. The WLAN module slot can usually be accessed by opening a compartment cover on the bottom of the computer, but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 1 English Installing the WLAN module CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to the Removing a WLAN module section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the antenna connector cables in the system. Some notebook PCs have 2 antenna connector cables and some have 3 antenna connector cables. 2 Installation Guide English 3. Insert the WLAN module 1 into the slot at an angle, press the module down 2, and use the screws 3 provided in this option kit to secure the module in place. For HP Compaq 2510, 2710, 6510, 6710, and 8510 Notebook PCs, use screws in the plastic bag labeled 1. For HP Compaq 6910 and 8710 Notebook PCs, use screws in the plastic bag labeled 2. Installation Guide 3 English 4. Connect the antenna cables to the WLAN module. Be sure to connect each antenna cable to the appropriate connector on the module. For example, connect cable 1 to Connector 1. The WLAN module has three connectors: Connector 1 is the Main connector, Connector 2 is the Auxiliary connector, and Connector 3 is the third WLAN connector. If the system has only two antenna cables, do not use the third WLAN connector. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. Do not insert the cables at an angle, this can cause damage to the the center pin of the antenna connector. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN module to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 4 Installation Guide English Installing the WLAN module software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN module. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software from http://www.hp.com/support. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the software from http://www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 5 English Removing a WLAN module CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 or 3 antenna cables from the WLAN module by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 6 Installation Guide English 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN module up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 7 English Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN module. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Click Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. For further product details, refer to the user guides on the computer by selecting Start > Help and Support > User Guides. User guides for select models may also be provided on a User Guides disc. 8 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your device. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplaines, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer . 2. In the left pane, select View System Information >

Hardware tab > Device Manager. Installation Guide 9 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 10 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Installation Guide 11 Regulatory Notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 12 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65-

to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Installation Guide 13 Regulatory Notices For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. 14 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Installation Guide 15 Regulatory Notices Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 16 Installation Guide Regulatory Notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Korean notice Installation Guide 17 Regulatory Notices Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. 18 Installation Guide

416491-B21.book Page i Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installation Guide WLAN Mini Card Installation Guide (GR) Installation Guide (IS) Installation Guide (FR) Installation Guide (IT) Installation Guide (JP) Installation Guide (KR) Installation Guide (SC) Installation Guide (TC) Document Part Number: 416491-B21 April 2006 416491-B21.book Page iii Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide WLAN Mini Card First Edition: April 2006 Document Part Number: 416491-B21 416491-B21.book Page iii Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents English Before you begin . 1 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 2 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 5 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 6 Information and updates. 8 German Before you begin . 9 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 10 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 13 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 14 Information and updates. 16 Spanish (International) Before you begin . 17 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 18 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 21 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 22 Information and updates. 24 Installation Guide iii 416491-B21.book Page iv Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents French Before you begin . 25 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 26 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 29 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 30 Information and updates. 32 Italian Before you begin . 33 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 34 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 37 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 38 Information and updates. 40 Japanese Before you begin . 41 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 42 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 45 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 46 Information and updates. 48 Korean Before you begin . 49 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 50 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 53 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 54 Information and updates. 56 iv Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page v Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Contents S Chinese Before you begin . 57 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 58 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 61 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 62 Information and updates. 64 T Chinese Before you begin . 65 Installing the WLAN Mini Card . 66 Installing the WLAN Mini Card software . 69 Removing a WLAN Mini Card . 70 Information and updates. 72 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 74 Brazilian notices. 77 Canadian notices . 78 Avis Canadien . 78 European Union notices . 79 Indian notice. 81 Japanese notices . 81 Taiwan notice . 86 Installation Guide v 416491-B21.book Page vi Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM 416491-B21.book Page 1 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 1 416491-B21.book Page 2 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 2 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 3 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 3 416491-B21.book Page 4 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 4 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 5 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software English The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 5 416491-B21.book Page 6 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 6 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 7 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 7 416491-B21.book Page 8 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM English Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 8 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 9 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 9 416491-B21.book Page 10 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 10 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 11 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 11 416491-B21.book Page 12 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 12 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 13 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software German The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 13 416491-B21.book Page 14 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 14 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 15 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 15 416491-B21.book Page 16 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM German Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 16 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 17 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 17 416491-B21.book Page 18 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 18 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 19 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 19 416491-B21.book Page 20 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 20 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 21 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Installing the WLAN Mini Card software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 21 416491-B21.book Page 22 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 22 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 23 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 23 416491-B21.book Page 24 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Spanish (International) Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 24 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 25 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 25 416491-B21.book Page 26 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 26 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 27 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 27 416491-B21.book Page 28 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 28 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 29 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software French The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 29 416491-B21.book Page 30 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 30 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 31 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 31 416491-B21.book Page 32 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM French Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 32 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 33 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 33 416491-B21.book Page 34 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 34 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 35 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 35 416491-B21.book Page 36 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 36 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 37 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Italian The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 37 416491-B21.book Page 38 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 38 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 39 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 39 416491-B21.book Page 40 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Italian Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 40 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 41 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 41 416491-B21.book Page 42 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 42 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 43 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 43 416491-B21.book Page 44 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 44 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 45 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Japanese The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 45 416491-B21.book Page 46 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 46 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 47 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 47 416491-B21.book Page 48 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Japanese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 48 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 49 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 49 416491-B21.book Page 50 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 50 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 51 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 51 416491-B21.book Page 52 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 52 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 53 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software Korean The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 53 416491-B21.book Page 54 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 54 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 55 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 55 416491-B21.book Page 56 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Korean Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 56 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 57 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 57 416491-B21.book Page 58 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 58 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 59 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 59 416491-B21.book Page 60 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 60 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 61 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card software The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 61 416491-B21.book Page 62 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 62 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 63 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 63 416491-B21.book Page 64 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM S Chinese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 64 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 65 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Before you begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a WLAN Mini Card authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Getting Started Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the WLAN Mini Card slot location. Access the WLAN Mini Card slot. The WLAN Mini Card slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. 2. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Disconnect the power cord. 5. Remove the battery. Installation Guide 65 416491-B21.book Page 66 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. If your computer has a WLAN Mini Card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Gently remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 66 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 67 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1, press the Mini Card down 2, and use the screws provided in this option kit to secure the card in place 3. Installation Guide 67 416491-B21.book Page 68 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the WLAN Mini Card. The connectors on the WLAN Mini Card are marked aux and main. The aux cable may be gray or white, or it may be black with a gray or white band next to the connector. The main cable is black. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If the antenna cable is inserted into the connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before you begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the WLAN Mini Card to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 68 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 69 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Installing the WLAN Mini Card software T Chinese The installation disc included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the WLAN Mini Card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the disc may be available. Refer to the Information and updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard opens.) 3. Insert the WLAN software disc included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Installation of the device driver is complete. If your computer does not have an optical drive, follow the instructions in Information and updates to download the software from www.hp.com/support. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. The Wireless LAN utility is located on the WLAN software disc included with this option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 69 416491-B21.book Page 70 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before you begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the WLAN Mini Card by lifting each cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 70 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 71 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese 3. Remove the screws 1, and pull the WLAN Mini Card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 71 416491-B21.book Page 72 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM T Chinese Information and updates Install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini Card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. You will download the SoftPaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select Download drivers and software, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook User Guides disc or Tablet PC User Guides disc for further product details. 72 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 73 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices. Installation Guide 73 416491-B21.book Page 74 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 74 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 75 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify the product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Installation Guide 75 416491-B21.book Page 76 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 76 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 77 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

-

Installation Guide 77 416491-B21.book Page 78 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65-

to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 78 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 79 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM European Union notices Regulatory Notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Installation Guide 79 416491-B21.book Page 80 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 416491-B21.book Page 81 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Installation Guide 81 416491-B21.book Page 82 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Wireless LAN 802.11b device 2. 4DS 4 Wireless LAN 802.11g device 2. 4OF 4 Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

82 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 83 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Installation Guide 83 416491-B21.book Page 84 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

84 Installation Guide 416491-B21.book Page 85 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Bluetooth device 2 . 4 F H 1 Regulatory Notices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

Installation Guide 85 416491-B21.book Page 86 Monday, February 27, 2006 8:20 PM Regulatory Notices Taiwan notice 86 Installation Guide

Use strictly per Intel instructions. Specific regulatory approvals, applicable only wit Intel authorized components, software and antenna D solutions, as installed by an Intel authorized integrator. Unauthorized modifcations will void regulatory approvals and warranties. intel. Model: WM3945ABG MOW1 cWANus FCC ID: B4WM3945ABG Assy No: 996331-001 SVS IC: 466Q-WM3945AG Spares No: 407676-004 Customer SN: CNT54400MG HL 0 ION AMUN TAY YA Intel SN: 023903445CVD26436003 Product of China Rev:0A This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements ofthe Canadian inerference-

Causing equipment Regulations. CANADA ICESINMB-003 ClassiClasse (8) 2189 023030-001 Gy232 LL

416324-001 Contains Intel WLAN radio model WM3945ABG Contains FCC ID: B94WM3945ABG IC: 466Q-WM3945AG SCT RCPINWM05-886 CNC C-4531 SIRIM Z189 02932/POSTEL/2005 1823 N232

View 2:

rear connector panel RUBBER PLUGS:

Color = Titanium LATCH CATCH:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish DISPLAY TRIM:

Color = Carbonite Texture = MT11015 DISPLAY BEZEL:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish DISPLAY COVER:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish KEYTRIM:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 POINTSTICK:

Color = Blue Material = Rubber CAPS LOCK LED:

Color = Green KEY CAPS:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 DISPLAY LID BUMPER:

Color = Carbonite Material = Rubber ICON:

Color = PMS 430C 2 KEYBOARD DECK:

Color = Titanium Material = IML Film Finish = Polish General specs, please refer to program documentation for specifics ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C FINAL FINAL FINAL FINAL View 6:

top case &

bottom case TABLET NAVIGATION &

CTRL+ALT+DEL BUTTONS:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 View 3:

front S-VIDEO CONNECTOR:

Color = Black VGA CONNECTOR:

Color = Black FINGERPRINT READER:

Color = Black LIGHT SENSOR:

P/N = TEIJIN LV-2250y Recessed 0.3mm around Light Sensor Finish = Polish HP SERIES NUMBER BADGE SPEC:

Font:

Futura Medium Color = PMS 427C

"0000" represents the number of digits to be used in the series number. Xxxxxx xx0000 Label is polycarbonate matched to the color Carbonite.

"xx" represents lowercase letters to be used for HP series name. Compaq tc4400 HP tc4400

*Please refer to System Team for actual model #

DISPLAY COVER:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish BUTTONS:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 POWER BUTTON:

Icon is first Printed in Black. Then button is Satin Chrome Plated. POWER LED:

Color = Green SPEAKER GRILL:

Color = Carbonite Paint Material = Perforated Metal View 1:

left end ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C View 5:

right end FINAL FINAL FINAL FINAL BUTTONS:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 MUTE BUTTON LED:

Color = Orange TABLET CLUTCH COVER:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 KEYBOARD RETAINER:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 HP JEWEL LOGO:

Size = 3 New Flat Black Badge Part# = TBD BASE:

Color = Carbonite Paint Finish = Polish LABEL AREA:

Recessed 0.3mm Finish = Polish ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C SD Slot (no door) 12.5mm(h) x 44mm(w) 17mm(h) x 51mm(w) 10 1 PCMCIA DOOR:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture =MT11010 PCMCIA BUTTON:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture =MT11010 MICROPHONE JACK:

Color = Chrome Metal HEADPHONE JACK:

Color = Chrome Metal NUM LOCK LED:

Color = Green FN SHIFT LEGENDS:

Color = PMS 279C KEYBOARD LEGEND & ICON LAYOUT:

Match these legend and Icon fonts, sizes and locations for U.S. Keyboard application. PRIMARY KEYBOARD LEGENDS:

Color = PMS 538C NOTE: Microsoft has a minimum spacing requirement between their OS label and any other object, such as:

type, photography, borders, or other logos etc.The required clear space around the Logo must be x wide, where x equals the width of the Logo.

*As per 05/01/05 61838v6 Designed for Microsoft Windows Logo License Agreement (Hardware) Version 8.0 4 3 18mm(h) x 18mm(w) 22mm(h) x 14.7mm(w) EXTENDED LIFE BATTERY DOOR COVER:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 Recess = Polish 5 MEMORY DOOR:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 MOLDED ICONS:

Raised 0.3mm Finish = Polish BATTERY CHARGE LEDS:

Color = Green BATTERY DOOR:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 11 50mm(h) x 60mm(w) 28.2mm(h) x 70.7mm(w) FINAL FINAL FINAL FINAL ERASER, END CAP, BUTTON & TIP:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 BATTERY RELEASE LATCH:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 BATTERY CHARGE LABEL:

Polycarbonate Color = Carbonite Icon = PMS 430C LATCH:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11015 POINTSTICK BUTTONS:

Color = Carbonite Material = Rubber BATTERY LED:

On Charge = Amber 90% Charge = Green TOUCHPAD BUTTONS:

Color = Carbonite Material = Rubber TOUCHPAD:

Color = Carbonite Material = Mylar MOLDED ICONS:

Raised 0.3mm Finish = Polish PEN HOUSING:

Color = Titanium With Clear Coat SCROLLBAR ICONS:

Color = PMS 431C ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C TEXT:

Color = PMS 430C LOGO:

Color = PMS 877C WIRELESS LED:

Color = Blue ICON:

Raised 0.3mm 6 View 4:

front button panel detail ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C POWER AND HDD/MULTI-BAY LEDS:

Color = Green IR WINDOW:

Material = IR Lens Finish = Polish BASE:

Color = Carbonite Paint Finish = Polish HEA2.0TC20060110 ANTENNA COVER:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish DISPLAY COVER:

Color = Titanium Finish = Polish HP JEWEL LOGO:

Size = #5 New Black Badge Part# = 7121-8267 9 8 MOLDED ICON:

Raised 0.3mm Finish = Polish ICONS:

Color = PMS 430C LABEL AREAS (4X):

Recessed 0.3mm Finish = Polish HDD DOOR:

Color = Carbonite GE# = GY2A547 Texture = MT11010 RUBBER FEET:

Color = Carbonite 7

*Keyboard Screw Icon also printed on Label. Color = PMS 430C Modem

(Reverse Printing) Service (Taiwan only) Keyboard Processor MS OS MS COA 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Service Tag 10 Country Recycle 11 Battery (on bag) 7 Regulatory - *Keyboard Screw Icon printed on Label. Color = PMS 430C Wireless

(Reverse Printing) Center label using crosshair. Apply label starting in this corner. Mylar/IML Surface Molded Surface Painted Surface Metal Surface Chrome Surface Finish Texture Badge Markup Question Polycarbonate Label Printed Icon Backlite Blue Backlite Amber Backlite Green Backlite Orange Titanium Carbonite Platinum Silver IR Lens Material PMS 279C - Lt. Blue PMS 427C - Lt. Gray PMS 538C - Lt. Gray PMS 430C - Med. Gray PMS 431C - Med. Gray PMS 877C - Silver LED Blue LED Amber LED Green LED Orange Label hidden in bay or door hp graphic plan TITLE Heavenly 2.0 Tablet TC Start DATE 07.28.05 Scale 1:1 GRAPHIC PLAN Developer THRU rev.A = Graphic Design Specialist GRAPHIC PLAN OWNER rev.B & BEYOND = Lead Sr. Industrial Designer Aniden Interactive Paul Doczy ei Graphic Designer Specialist =

Eric Irwin pd lead ID 1 =

Paul Doczy FILENAME:

HEA2.0TC20060110.ai Illustrator v. 11

Hewlett-Packard Company 20555 SH 249 Mail Stop 060607 Houston, TX 77070-2698 www.hp.com Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.8029 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com November 22, 2005 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Authorizing Aegis Labs to act as our agent for preparation of applications Dear Sirs:

Under FCC Docket Number 20780 and General Docket Number 80-284 pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Regulations, this is a letter of authorization to accept Aegis Labs as an Agent for Hewlett-Packard, 20555 SH 249, Houston, TX 77070, for a period of one year, to sign applications before the Commission on our behalf, to make representations to you on our behalf, and to receive and exchange data between our company and the Commission limited to the following conditions:

1. This authorization is extended only to the Hewlett-Packard certification of the Intel Model WM3945ABG. 2. This authorization is extended only for FCC certification. 3. All invoices for services rendered should be sent to Aegis Labs Inc. and not to Hewlett-Packard. Licenses and test reports generated on Hewlett-Packards behalf must be emailed or copied to my attention when completed. 4. No access should be granted to any existing Hewlett-Packard file or project information. If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash

Hewlett-Packard Company 20555 SH 249 Mail Stop 060607 Houston, TX 77070-2698 www.hp.com Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.8029 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com November 22, 2005 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Anti-Drug Abuse Attestation Dear Sirs:

Please accept this letter as an attestation on behalf of Hewlett-Packard, 20555 SH 249, Houston, TX 77070, that to the best of our knowledge, information and belief, none of our officers, directors, or persons holding 5% or more of the outstanding stock or shares, voting or non-voting, have been denied federal benefits under section 5301 of the Anti-

Drug Abuse Act of 1988.21 U.S.C. 853(a). If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash

May 1, 2006 RE:

Hewlett-Packard Company FCC ID:

B94WM3945ABG Answers to the FCC comments on the above referenced Application. 1. Related to 15.204(c)(3), please provide summary of list of all antennas authorized and intended for use under this FCC ID 2.4GHz Peak Gain in dBi 5GHz Peak Gain in dBi Antenna Type Antenna Part Number Status Date of Approval Type of Application HP Altima PIFA 2.93 2.84 Corporation EBC-C4 Approved 2/3/2006 HP Jakarta Heavenly-

Mininote Heavenly-

3.0 PIFA 2.96 0.97 CT6 Approved 2/3/2006 PIFA 2.39 3.14 Corporation EBC-C Submitted Submitted Not Submitted Uploaded to FCC Not Tablet PIFA 0.09 3.34 Corporation EBC-C Manufacturer/

code name Wistron NeWeb Hon Hai Precision Ind. Co., LTD. Wistron NeWeb Wistron NeWeb Wistron NeWeb Original

(Modular) Original

(Modular) Not CIIPC

(LMA/Portable) CIIPC

(Modular) HP Vail 2.0 PIFA 2.95 3.12 Corporation EBC-I Approved 4/10/2006 2. As stated in several TCB/testlab info/training meetings in last few years, here again are filing guidelines for limited-modular-approval devices installed in various host/final products:

-General filing guidance for mini-PCI and similar modules, for example in notebook computer:

--Filings for specific laptop(s) need external and internal-as-installed antenna photos or drawings, to support RF exposure compliance

--Final-product laptop approvals need laptop user manual describing wireless function, installation/operation, final-product operation, etc.

--Filings containing multiple laptop models should use LMA

--Describe integral and/or optional Bluetooth collocations

--Include laptop DoC info/status in filing

--C2pc filings to add final-product (host) should include final device FCC ID labeling info, including labels for other modules if applicable. 2a. related to 2.1033(b)(7), please submit external and/or internal photos including antennas and antenna-positions info Please refer to pages 3- 4 and 24- 26 for antenna diagrams, photos and antenna placement from antenna data sheet file name Antenna Wistron in Heavenly Tablet-Tablet Rev5_7a.pdf sumitted with this application. 2b. please submit final-product operating instructions Please refer to attachments filename 367427-002 and 405775001b 3. SAR report at section 1.2 mentions a spacing between phantom and product. A standard separation distance to allow for clothing thickness has not been established in FCC Lab SAR test procedures guidance. Notebook and tablet PCs and similar devices are requested to evaluate SAR with final product in contact with phantom. Please re-test any operating configurations and device positions which presently report SAR greater than 0.8 W/kg. Please refer to response in attachment filename response to comments concerning SAR.pdf 4. FYI no-response requested - we note that SAR data was voluntarily submitted for front-face of final product in contact with phantom; tablet-PCs are requested to evaluate SAR for bottom of keyboard-section (or slate) in contact with phantom, and for edge-on in contact with phantom when product allows screen orientations that for normal use when held/cradled in one arm can place edge with antennas near torso for seated or standing positions. No response requested. 5. This filing does not appear to presently contain appropriate info to support grantee responsibility for FCC RF exposure compliance. For tablet PCs (both slate and convertible types) which have 0 & 180 deg. landscape and portrait screen-orientation modes, edge of device near or in contact with the user's body is expected to be a normal use position. SAR evaluation is needed for edge(s) of product which contain antennas in contact with phantom

(display face normal to phantom), unless transmitting is disabled for those certain display orientations. Please refer to response in attachment filename response to comments concerning SAR.pdf 5a. Filing is presently unclear about exact positions tested for SAR, e.g., summary pages in SAR report section 6.5 list DUT position as "Front." Please provide separate exhibit containing only a list of all final-product SAR test positions, and test setup photos showing product placed at phantom. Please refer to response in attachment filename response to comments concerning SAR.pdf 5b. Please address FCC RF exposure compliance for tablet edge positions that place transmit antenna(s) in contact with phantom, or provide Operational Description info if final-product prevents transmission in those positions. Please refer to response in attachment filename response to comments concerning SAR.pdf